2012 FIAT 500 Abarth Owners Manual

FI AT 500 ABARTH
Chrysler Group LLC

O WNE R S MA NU A L
2 0 1 2
2
0
1
2

F
I
A
T

5
0
0

A
B
A
R
T
H
12FX24-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
960618cv1.psp 12FF500-126-AD Chrysler 1" gutter 03/28/2011 17:46:33
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink-
ing, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FIAT Group Marketing &
Corporate Communication SpA, used under license by
Chrysler Group LLC.
Copyright 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
accidents.
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink-
ing, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FIAT Group Marketing &
Corporate Communication SpA, used under license by
Chrysler Group LLC.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicles electronic systems.
EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be as-
sured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc-
tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
traditional to our vehicles.
This Owners Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers:
the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity
the range of additional services available to FIAT
Group Automobiles customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicles equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owners Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owners Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on
the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) If Equipped . . . 15
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 16
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 16
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 16
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 17
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 32
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 33
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 37
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 39
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 43
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 63
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical
key simply press the mechanical key release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
2. Bring the vehicle to a stop.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever into REVERSE gear.
5. Turn the key to place the ignition switch in the
OFF/LOCK position.
6. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
7. Release the clutch pedal.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the ignition
to the OFF/LOCK position, apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into REVERSE gear,
and remove the key fob from the ignition. When
leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
Ignition Switch Positions
1 STOP (OFF/LOCK) 3 AVV (START)
2 MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to Body Lubrication in
Maintaining Your Vehicle for maintenance
information.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the drivers door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK, sounds a
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
2
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some after-market remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in ve-
hicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of program-
ming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key
is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the users authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key
Release Button
2
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the drivers door or twice,
within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal. If a door is ajar the turn signal lights will flash at
an increased rate and there will be no horn chirp, this is
to indicate that a door is still ajar.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the users authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of a battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Press the mechanical key release button and release
the mechanical key to access the battery case screw
located on the side of the Key Fob.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob
using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place. Key Fob Screw Location
Battery Case Removed
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from
inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door
handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the
door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed,
the door will lock.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the ignition
to the OFF/LOCK position, apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into REVERSE gear,
and remove the key fob from the ignition. When
leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
Door Lock Handle
2
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the door
handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate. If the door handle is pushed a red lock
indicator will show on the door handle (indicating
locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock.
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the
vehicle, the power door lock switch will not operate
when the key is in the ignition and either front door is
open. A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
key.
Autoclose If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled using
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To change the Autoclose setting in the EVIC, proceed as
follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button On or Off
will flash on the display (according to the previous
setting).
2. Press the + or button for setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
in Understanding Your Vehicle for further information.
Driver Power Door Lock Handle
2
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls located on the shifter
bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the
driver and passenger door windows. The window con-
trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
Auto-Down If Equipped
The drivers door window switch may have an Auto-
Down feature. Press the window switch for approxi-
mately one second, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down move-
ment, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock
switches located on the front door handles.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle
2
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
All seat belt systems (except the drivers) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage
System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren).
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and
SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in
If You Need Consumer Assistance.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags wont deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Side air bags also need roomto inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
2
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
WARNING!
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces wont
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you cant straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Positioning Lap Belt
2
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
Afrayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child
Restraints section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Passenger
First Row N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR
N/A Not Applicable
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
2
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupants chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
2
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. FIAT Group Automobiles S.p.A. does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the drivers or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The drivers Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passengers Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 Driver And Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags
3 Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
2 Knee Bolster
2
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the
air bags to have different inflation levels based on several
factors, including the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABIC is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SAB are marked with
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
seats.
NOTE:
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolster
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
2
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The SAB are marked with an air bag label
sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seats trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Label
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the
body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers,
placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant,
that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries.
The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows
on the impact side.
NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Label Location
2
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant
protection.
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
passenger side front passenger by positioning the pas-
senger for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) and Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) also work with
seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemen-
tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side
collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
2
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. If the key is in the OFF/
LOCK position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system
is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you wont have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. Alarge
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
2
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of
the air bag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Based on several factors, including the severity and type
of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of
the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of
non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and the door.
The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC
will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the
vehicle.
Aquantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is
inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event, the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
Unlock the doors automatically.
After the event occurs, when the system is active, the
message Fuel Cutoff See Handbook is displayed.
2
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
System Reset Procedure
After an impact causing air bag deployment, the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel
cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned
off. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road
you must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be
placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition ON. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID.
Customer Action Customer Will See
7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn ignition OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 sec-
onds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset
procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you havent healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
2
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturers in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat, includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
2
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the Body Control Module (BCM) fuse block inside
the vehicle for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicles systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
2
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owners Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the childs
size.
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to Lower An-
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH).
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicles seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicles seat cushion while the childs back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
2
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
Check belt fit periodically. A childs squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. FIAT Group Automobiles also recommends
that you make sure that you can install the child
restraint in the vehicle where you will use it, before
you buy it.
The restraint must be appropriate for your childs
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1866SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canadas web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicles seat belts, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are nowavail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicles seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be in-
stalled in the outboard positions only. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seat-
ing positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the
2
vehicles seat belt for the outboard position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only in-
stall the child restraints using the vehicles seat belts.
Please refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt for typical installation instructions.
WARNING!
You should never install LATCH-compatible child
seats so that two seats share a common anchorage. If
installing seats in adjacent seating positions, or if
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, in-
stall the restraints using the vehicles seat belts.
Installing The LATCH Compatible Child
Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The lower anchorages are round bars which are
part of the seat and body structure. They are
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and just visible when you
lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
intersection of the surfaces. The lower strap hooks are
passed over the top of each bar, pushing aside the seat
cover material.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position, located in the rear surface of the
seatback.
The lower strap hooks are passed over the top of each
bar, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be
equipped with separate straps on each side,
with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hook or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
of the seat cover material. Then attach the tether strap to
the anchorage directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint, preferably between the
2
head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. Fi-
nally, tighten all three straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat, remov-
ing slack in the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturers instructions.
NOTE:
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove the
slack in the strap.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not
play with them. In addition, never leave unattended
children in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
Automatic Locking Mode description under Occu-
pant Restraints.
The chart below defines the seating positions with an
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch
plate.
Driver Passenger
CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
If the belt still cant be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
2
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still cant make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Route the tether strap under the head restraint to
provide the most direct path for the strap between the
anchor and the child seat.
If necessary, move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchor.
Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
tether anchor. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-
ing to the child restraint manufacturers instructions.
Tether Straps Routed To Tether Anchors
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
Along break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.
2
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
belts.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
2
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires for
proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped . . . 72
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Heated Mirrors If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
BLUE&ME Hands-Free Communication If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
The Hands-Free Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . . 84
Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Ez Entry Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Heated Seats If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped . . . . . 92
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . 94
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Front Fog Lights If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . 96
Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Tilt Steering Column If Equipped . . . . . . . . 100
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Park Assist If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Rear Park Assist Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . 106
Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . 106
Power Sunroof If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sun Shade If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Cigar Lighter If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Glove Box Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. Alight
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the drivers
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select
switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select switch to either the L (left)
or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switches
Spotter Mirror If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a drivers side spotter
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
visibility on the drivers side of the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to Rear Window Features in
Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur-
ther information.
Spotter Mirror
3
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors.
BLUE&ME HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION
IF EQUIPPED
Overview
Windows Mobile-based FIAT BLUE&ME is a per-
sonal telematic system enabling you to use communica-
tion and entertainment applications expressly designed
for use in the car.
The BLUE&ME system installed on your car is
equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and
media player, and it is preset for future installation of
additional services.
The BLUE&ME system, fully integrated with voice
commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc-
tion display messages, gives you the possibility of inter-
acting with your Bluetooth wireless technology mobile
phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without
having to take your eyes off the road or remove your
hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
you are not required to train the voice recognition system
to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is
nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the
voice recognition system is of the speaker independent
type.
With this system you can also play your favorite music
stored on USB device and select tracks and playback
modes with both voice commands or buttons on the
steering wheel.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules
subject to the following two conditions:
This device must accept all interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Hands-Free Kit
The basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice
recognition with Bluetooth wireless technology. With
this system you can make and receive calls safely and
securely by using either voice commands or buttons on
the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving
condition without ever having to take your eyes off the
road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as
required by current laws.
Bluetooth wireless technology enables wireless connec-
tion between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit
installed on your car.
To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth wireless
technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit
gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your
mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device
does not feature this capability. You can also interact with
3
your mobile phone manually and visually using the
steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multi-
function display.
For further details on the mobile phones supported by
BLUE&ME, refer to section BLUE&ME SUPPORTED
MOBILE PHONES.
To get started with BLUE&ME hands-free kit with
voice recognition, you have to simply pair your
Bluetooth wireless technology enabled mobile phone
with the system.
Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once.
NOTE:
During the mobile phone pairing procedure,
BLUE&ME attempts to detect a phone equipped
with Bluetooth wireless technology within range and
then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden-
tification Number (PIN).
Once your phone is paired, you have the option to
transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free
kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts
1 Mute/ESC 2 Phone/Main
4 Voice Recognition (VR) 3 Phone Hang Up
list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to
answer a call and also to answer another incoming
phone call.
To interact with BLUE&ME you can use either the
buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
With voice recognition, you can perform system func-
tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as
keywords. When the system recognizes a keyword,
it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice
recognition is an easy and convenient way to use
BLUE&ME.
All the system functions are available within the
BLUE&ME Main Menu. When the car is not moving,
you can scroll through the complete menu by using either
the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands.
When you are travelling, you can interact with
BLUE&ME by using the buttons on the steering wheel
or voice commands relevant only to phone functions
(LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK ) and the media
player. To activate settings when travelling you can only
use voice commands.
The hands-free kit enables the following operations:
Contact Calling By Voice you can call a contact in
your mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You
can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning
through the entries on the multifunction display. (To
use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone
contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook).
Digit Dialing By Voice you can dial a phone
number by pressing the VR button on the steering
wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed.
To Call The SMS Text Sender call directly the last
SMS text sender or the sender of a message received
and stored in the BLUE&ME inbox.
3
To Answer A Call you can answer an incoming call
by pressing the MAIN/Phone button on the steering
wheel.
Conference Call you can call another contact while
you are engaged in a phone conversation (with
Bluetooth phones supporting this option).
Call Waiting while engaged in a phone conversa-
tion, you can receive notification of another incoming
phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and
switch between two ongoing phone conversations.
(Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compat-
ible mobile phones).
Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call you can
refuse an incoming call or end a current call by
pressing the Phone Hang-up button on the steering
wheel.
After you place your mobile phone in the car environ-
ment and create a pairing relationship with
BLUE&ME, you can make phone calls by speaking
keywords or pressing buttons on the steering wheel.
When using the hands-free phone, the audio output of a
phone conversation is heard through your car sound
speakers.
Message Reader
The BLUE&ME message reader enables automatic
reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts
you receive on your Bluetooth wireless technology
mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired
and connected to BLUE&ME system. It does not pro-
vide access to messages that were received before you
entered the car and connected with the BLUE&ME
system. The message reader will also interpret any ab-
breviation and emoticon contained in the SMS text.
NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text
message reader function or automatic phonebook trans-
fer via Bluetooth. Consult www.fiatusa.com for further
information on the list of compatible mobile phones.
Message reader functions are managed by the control
buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME
voice commands.
The BLUE&ME message reader enables the following
operations:
To display on the instrument panel multifunction
display a visual notification signal indicating that you
have received a new SMS text on your Bluetooth
wireless technology mobile phone, with senders
number/name; BLUE&ME will also ask whether to
read you the message that has been received.
To manage the list of SMS texts received on your
BLUE&ME paired mobile phone.
To read the messages received and stored. Messages
can be read multiple times.
To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the
steering wheel or voice commands.
To delete individual messages or the entire inbox
using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice
commands.
The BLUE&ME system can also recognize and read
abbreviations, if any (e.g. ILUVU will be read like I
love you) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-)
will be read like Smile), that are currently used to write
SMS texts.
Media Player
With the BLUE&ME media player you can play, via the
car sound system, the digital audio files stored on a USB
device by simply connecting it to the USB port located in
the glove box of the car.
3
In this way, while you are driving you can play your
favorite personal music collections.
iPod Player see dedicated paragraph under Media
Player Functions.
The media player enables the following operations:
Digital Audio Playback you can play all your
digital audio files (.mp3,.wma,.wav,.aac) or play a
customized playlist (.m3u or. wpl format).
Audio File Selection By Category you can play all
audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or
genre.
Playback Options while playing tracks you can
select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track,
Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track.
NOTE:
The media player does not support audio files com-
pressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Right
Management) protected audio files. Non-supported
audio files that may be present on the USB device will
be ignored.
To use the media player, you have to simply connect
(directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to
the car USB port. Turning the ignition key to ON,
BLUE&ME will start building your media library. At
the end of this operation you can surf the whole
library and scroll its categories as required using the
buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
BLUE&ME will then play your selection via the car
sound system.
WARNING!
Operating certain parts of this system while driv-
ing can distract your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other serious
consequences; for this reason certain functions
shall be disabled by the BLUE&ME system until
driving conditions are secure and, if required, only
when the car is stopped.
Read and Follow Instructions: before using your
system, read and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this Users Guide. Not
following precautions found in this Users Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious conse-
quences.
(Continued)
Keep the Users Guide in the car: when kept in the
car, the Users Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the system.
Please make certain that before using the system
for the first time, all persons have access to the
Users Guide and read its instructions and safety
information carefully.
3
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjusting Bar
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline
lever, lean back until the desired position has been
reached, and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
3
Seat Height Adjustment
The drivers seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull upward on the
release tether, located on the outboard side of the seat-
back, dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat
forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat.
Height Adjuster
Release Tether
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to
its locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
Memory Feature
The driver seat also has a memory feature, which can
operate in two ways:
Memory Function Option 1) Full Seat Back And
Track Fore/Aft Position Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and
the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the
position they were most recently adjusted to. This is
accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its
last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is
returned upright.
Memory Function Option 2) Seat Back Only
Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first
be returned upright prior to going back to the last
fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in
the seat back memory being set only The track will then
be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory posi-
tion. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to
reestablish memory function option 1), the seat has to be
returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track
position as described in Memory function option 1).
Heated Seats If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
Press the switch once to turn on the heated
seats. Press the switch a second time to shut the
heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
3
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted before operating the vehicle or occupy-
ing a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with
the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of an
accident.
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. Refer to Occupant
Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle for information on tether routing.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located
on the left kick panel, rearward.
Rear Head Restraint
Hood Release Lever
3
2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the
hood, near the center, and raise the hood.
Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left side
when standing in front of the hood) of the engine
compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of
hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position.
In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop
rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod. Safety Latch Location
Hood Prop Rod
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up-
ward to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever towards the instrument panel to turn on
the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beams until the
lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
Headlight Operation
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL.
The DRL function can be turned on or off using the
display menus. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) in Understanding Your Instrument
Panel for further information.
Turn Signals
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right
turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond-
ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to
indicate the operation of the turn signal.
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when
the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is
returned to a straight position.
Turn Signal Operation
3
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the left overhead, press the switch to
the right from its center position and the lights are always
on. Press the switch to the left fromits center position and
the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center
position, and the lights are turned on and off when the
doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side
of the overhead console controls the map or reading
function of the lights. Press the switch to the right to turn
on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn
on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
When one door is opened a 3 minute timer is acti-
vated.
When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a
10 second timer is activated.
When the doors are unlocked with Key Fob a 10 sec-
ond timer is activated.
When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
3
Front Fog Lights If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Press
the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Fog Light Switch
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent
but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed.
As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the Park
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for intermittent wipe operation. With the front wind-
shield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield
wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate
in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at
half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into
REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at
Low Speed and return to normal operation when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and
hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers
will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever
is released.
Rear Wiper Operation
3
TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls.
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Tilt Control Lever
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned
off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Speed Control Buttons
3
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
button.
To Deactivate
Asoft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica-
tion of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to the Park Assist System
Usage Precautions for the limitations of this system and
recommendations.
3
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance
from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the au-
dible alert becomes more frequent.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the
rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the car during the parking
maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear
is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 in (30 cm) away.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System.
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance
An obstacle is present within
the sensors field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases
as the distance decreases.
Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm)
Adjustable volume level. (Refer to Menu
Functions for further information).
Failure Sensor or System failures
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
Icon appears on display.
Message is displayed on multifunction display
(where provided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is cut out immediately if the distance
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance
measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condi-
tion occurs for the external sensors, the signal is cut off
after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers
parallel to walls).
3
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the multifunction display (if
equipped). Refer to Instrument Cluster De-
scriptions in Understanding Your Instrument
Panel for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display
shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavail-
able, without reference to the sensor in failure condition.
If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be
disabled. The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the va-
por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporar-
ily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles lo-
cated above or below the sensors will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
3
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots be-
fore backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surround-
ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead
console.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allowyour fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
To Open
Press and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at
the vented position. Press the switch a second time and
hold for approximately one second and release, the
sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is
called Express Open. During Express Open operation,
any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power
sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second,
the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the
switch a second time and hold for approximately one
second to completely close the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents the
sunroof from closing, press the switch forward and hold
for approximately one second after the reversal occurs.
This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed
position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Emergency Operation
In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box.
There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening
at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a
hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert
the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the
desired location.
Sun Shade If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
closed. To open the sun shade press the tab and move the
shade to a full open position.
Manual Sun Shade
3
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet,
located in the floor console, for added convenience. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or
accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console
3
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicles battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicles battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with great caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicles battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo-
cated on the floor console between the front seats.
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
3
STORAGE
Glove Box Compartment
The glove box is located on the right side of the instru-
ment panel. Pull outward on the door latch to open the
glove box. Push the glove box door upward to close it.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard
top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded-
down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area.
When returning the seatback to its upright position, push
rearward until the seatback is properly latched.
Glove Box Compartment
Rear Seat Release Buttons Folded Rear Seats
3
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located in the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster.
An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.
To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Turbo Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 135
EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . 138
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Sales Code (RAB) Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Functions And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Sirius Satellite Radio If Equipped . . . . . . 168
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
CD MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
iPod/USB/Media Player Control If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Operating Instructions Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 179
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 180
Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 Side Vent 7 Passenger Air Bag 13 Storage Compartment
2 Multifunction Lever Light Control 8 Glove Compartment 14 Shift Lever
3 Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 9 Rear Defrost Button 15 Sport Button
4 Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer 10 Hazard Button 16 Horn/Driver Airbag
5 Central Air Vents 11 Climate Controls 17 Boost Gauge
6 Storage Compartment/Radio 12 Power Windows Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
TURBO BOOST GAUGE
Your vehicle is equipped with a boost gauge and inte-
grated shift light indicator located to the left of the
instrument cluster. The boost gauge indicates the intake
manifold pressure relative to barometric pressure. The
engine management system in your vehicle intelligently
regulates intake manifold pressure based on environ-
mental (ambient) and engine operating conditions.
Turbo Boost Gauge
1 Turbo Boost Gauge
2 Shift Light Indicator
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Glow Plug Light If Equipped
The Glow Plug light will flash during engine oil
viscosity sensor measurement in cold weather.
During this measurement (up to 10 seconds), the starter
will be disabled. If the measured oil viscosity is OK, the
light will turn off and the engine will be allowed to crank.
If the measured oil viscosity is too high, engine cranking
will be disabled and the light will blink repeatedly until
the oil temperature is raised, preferably by an externally-
powered electric engine block heater (available from
your authorized dealer).
The message Plug In Engine Heater, will be displayed
in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature
is below 5F (-15C) at the time the engine is shut off as
a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
2. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear
window defroster. This indicator will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3. Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
4. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.0 gal-
lon (3.8L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
5. High Beam Indicator
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home
(Headlight Delay) Indicator If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow
Me Home feature is activated this indicator
will illuminate and the EVIC will show how
long the function remains active. For further information,
refer to Follow Me Home in Understanding The
Features of Your Vehicle.
7. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exte-
rior turn signal, when using the turn signal
lever.
4
8. Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if
any of the following conditions occur: Oil
Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off
Intervention, Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor
Failure.
9. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to Occupant Restraints
in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for
further information.
10. Cruise Indicator If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
system is on.
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on if the drivers seat belt
is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When driving, if
the drivers seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information.
12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicles non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to Jump Starting
Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies.
13. Power Steering System Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical
warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to Power Steering in Starting and
Operating for further information.
14. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
4
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
16. Automatic Gearbox Failure
This light will illuminate when there is an
automatic transmission fault.
17. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF/LOCK
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
4
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
19. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. The engine coolant temperature indicator
will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To
Do In Emergencies for further information.
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the Brake Warning Light turns
on it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the brake system reservoir.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position
to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF)
Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation /
Malfunction Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on for
four seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on con-
tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on,
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors or the trunk may be ajar.
25. Temperature Gauge
The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates
that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the
temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
4
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see Maintaining Your
Vehicle. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
26. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Display Area
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
cluster, all warnings including door and gate and
Change Engine Oil will only be displayed in the EVIC
display. For additional information, refer to Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.
27. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door
is located on the right side of the vehicle. When the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the digital
scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
NOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately
update accurately when refueling with the engine on.
28. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
29. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
4
The EVIC consists of the following:
System Status
Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
Outside Temperature Display
Trip Computer Functions
EVIC Control Buttons
Press the MENU ESC button briefly to access the menu
and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu
option. Press and hold the MENU ESC button (approxi-
mately one second) to return to the main screen.
Press the + button to scroll upward through the dis-
played menu and the related options or to increase the
displayed value.
Press the button to scroll downward through the
displayed menu and the related options or to decrease
the value displayed.
NOTE: Buttons + and activate different functions
according to the following situations:
To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
To increase or decrease values during settings.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC
display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers
covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a
few seconds.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Press the + and buttons to access the different
options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pressing the MENU
ESC button. Single presses on buttons + or will scroll
through the setup menu options. The menu includes the
following functions:
Speed Beep
Trip B Data
Set Time
Set Date
See Radio
Speed Display
Autoclose
Units
Language
Buzzer Volume
Button Volume
Hill Start
GSI Shift Up
Daylights (D.R.L.)
Exit Menu
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to select the main
menu option to set.
2. Press the + or button (by single presses) to select the
new setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to store the new
setting and go back to the main menu option previously
selected.
4
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to display the
first submenu option.
2. Press the + or button (by single presses) to scroll
through all the submenu options.
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant
setup menu.
4. Press the + or button (by single presses) to select the
new setting for this submenu option.
5. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to store the new
setting and go back to the previously selected submenu
option.
6. Press and hold the MENU ESC button to return to the
main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Change Engine Oil message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU/ESC button. To reset the oil change
indicator system (after performing the scheduled main-
tenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.(Do not
start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
A short button press displays the different values.
Along button press resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
Press and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
When the Trip distance reaches 9999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the Travel time reaches 99.59
(99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
4
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, press and hold the TRIP button for
over one second to reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU ESC button for longer
than one second.
Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
menu screen or press and hold the MENU ESC (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset start of new
trip).
Trip A can be used to display the figures relating to:
Trip distance A
Average consumption
Instant consumption A
Average speed A
Travel time A (driving time).
Trip B can be used to display the figures relating to:
Trip distance B
Average consumption B
Average speed B
Travel time B (driving time).
NOTE: Trip B functions may be excluded (see Trip B
Data). Range and Instantaneous consumption can-
not be reset.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message ---- will
appear on the display in the following cases:
Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.).
Trip planning must take into account the above notes.
Distance Travelled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Consumption
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Instant Consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message ---- will appear on the
display if the car is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicles average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
4
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Dimmer
The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable
of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust-
ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly.
NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may
change while travelling following an event that causes
switching from day to night conditions (or vice
versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on
avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.).
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:
1. Press the + or button to set the required brightness
level.
menu screen or press and hold the MENU ESC (approxi-
storing settings.
Speed Beep (Speed Limit)
With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit
(mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver is
immediately alerted.
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The display will
show the message (Speed Beep).
2. Press the + or button to select speed limit activation
(On) or deactivation (Off).
3. When the function is activated (On), briefly press the
MENU ESC button to display the presently set activation
speed. Pressing the + or buttons selects the speed limit.
Press MENU ESC to confirm selection.
NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 and 125 mph or
km/h, depending on the selected unit. The setting will
increase/decrease by five units each time the +/ button
is pressed. Press and hold the +/ button to increase/
decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly
pressing the button when you approach the required
setting.
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. On will flash
on the display.
2. Press the button. Off will flash on the display.
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
For further information see Trip Computer.
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. On or Off
will flash on the display (according to previous setting).
2. Press the + or button to select the setting.
4
Set Time (Clock)
This function may be used to set the clock through two
sub-menu items: Time and Mode.
Proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The display will
show the two sub-menu items Time and Mode.
2. Press the + or button to navigate the two sub-menu
items.
3. Select the required option and then press the MENU
ESC button.
4. When accessing the Time sub-menu item, briefly
press the MENU ESC button and hours will flash on
the display.
6. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and minutes
will flash on the display.
NOTE:
The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each
time the + or button is pressed. Press and hold the
button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save
the setting by briefly pressing the button when you
approach the required setting.
Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the
Time sub-function.
When accessing the Mode submenu, briefly press
the MENU ESC button. The previously set display
format will flash on the display.
Press the + or button to select 24h or 12h.
When you have selected the required settings, briefly
press the MENU ESC button to go back to the Time,
Mode sub-menu screen, or press and hold the MENU
ESC button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Set Date
This function may be used to set the date (day - month -
year).
To change the date proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and year will
flash on the display.
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and month will
5. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and day will
NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit
each time the + or button is pressed. Press and hold the
+ or button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly.
Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you
approach the required setting.
screen without storing the settings.
See Radio (Repeat Audio Information)
With this function active, the EVIC display shows infor-
mation relevant to the sound system.
Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning
activation or AutoSTore.
CD audio, CD MP3: track number.
4
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system
info displaying proceed as follows:
setting).
If the radio has BLUE&ME, refer to the appropriate
BLUE&ME Users Manual for further information.
Speed Display
When this function is activated the cluster will display
the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h).
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display
feature, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. MPH, km/
h, then Off will flash on the display (according to
previous setting).
2. Press the + or button to select display deactivation
Off, MPH or km/h.
screen.
Autoclose
With this function active, the doors will automatically
lock at when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
To change the setting proceed as follows:
setting).
Units (Set Units)
This function may be used to set the measurement unit in
three submenus: Distance, Temperature and Fuel
Economy.
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
three sub-menus.
2. Press the + or button to navigate the three sub-
menus.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press
the MENU ESC button.
4. When accessing the Distance submenu: briefly press
the MENU ESC button. Either mi or km will appear
on the display (according to the previous setting).
6. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the
sub-menu.
7. When accessing the Fuel Economy submenu, briefly
press the MENU ESC button. Either mpg, km/l or
l/100km will appear on the display (according to the
previous setting).
If the distance unit set is mi, the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in mpg.
4
If the distance unit set is km, the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in either km/l or l/100km.
sub-menu.
3. When accessing the Temperature submenu: briefly
press the MENU ESC button. Either F or C will
appear on the display (according to the previous setting).
sub-menu.
When you have made the required settings, briefly press
the MENU ESC button to go back to the sub-menu
screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button (ap-
proximately one second) to go back to the main screen
Language (Selecting The Language)
The messages can be displayed in the following lan-
guages: Italian, English, German, Portuguese, Spanish,
French, Dutch, Polish.
To set the required language, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The previously
set language will flash on the display.
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany-
ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to
one of eight volume levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
set volume level will flash on the display.
Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment)
This function may be used to adjust the volume of the
beep accompanying the buttons. MENU ESC , + or can
be adjusted according to 8 levels.
To adjust the volume, proceed as follows:
set volume level will flash on the display.
Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R.
Indication)
This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group
Automobiles dealer has deactivated the S.B.R. system.
Hill Start Assist
This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop
on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of
brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of
time after the foot has been removed from the brake
pedal.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
4
menu screen, or press and hold the button (approxi-
storing the settings.
GSI Shift Up
With this function active, the boost gauge will display a
shift up message and up arrow at the appropriate time of
shift.
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button Normal/Sport
or Sport will flash on the display (according to the
previous setting).
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This function may be used to activate / deactivate the
Daytime Running Lamps.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
three sub-menus.
menu screen, or press and hold the button (approxi-
storing the settings.
Exit Menu
This function closes the initial menu screen.
main screen.
Press the button to return to the first menu option
(Speed Beep).
Press the + button to return to the last menu option
(Daylights).
SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO
Introduction
The radio has been designed according to the specifica-
tions of the passenger compartment, with a personalized
design to match the style of the dashboard.
If the radio has BLUE&ME, refer to the appropriate
BLUE&ME Users Manual for further information.
4
The instructions for use are given below and we recom-
mend you to read them carefully.
Suggestions
Road Safety
Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g.
store stations) before beginning to drive.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly while driving.
Reception may be interfered with by the presence of
mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far
away from the broadcaster.
WARNING!
Having the volume turned up high can cause the
driver to no be able to hear important traffic sounds,
i.e. sirens, horns, etc. This could cause an accident.
Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear
background noises.
Care And Maintenance
Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning
and polishing products could damage the surface.
CDs
The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs
could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is
playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these
guidelines:
Only use branded CDs.
Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger
marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the
outside and clean them from the middle outwards.
Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or
sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface
of the CDs.
After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes
to prevent them from being damaged.
Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high tempera-
tures or moisture for long periods.
Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the
recorded surface with pencils or pens.
Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed,
distorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in
malfunctions or damage to the player.
The use of original CD media is required for the best
quality audio production. Correct operation is not
guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were
not correctly burned and/or with a maximumcapacity
above 650 Mb.
Do not use commercially available protective sheets
for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get
stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc.
If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few
seconds before the system starts to play it. The CD
player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected discs.
The fact that the CD is protected from being copied is
often shown in very small letters or is difficult to read
on the actual CD cover where it may be, for example,
COPY CONTROL, COPY PROTECTED, THIS
CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A PC/MAC.
The CD player is capable of reading most compression
systems currently in use, following the development
of these systems, the reading of all compression for-
mats is not guaranteed.
4
Technical Specifications
The complete system consists of:
Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one
speaker in each of the front doors.
Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in
each of the front pillars.
Two 100 mmdiameter full range speakers, one speaker
in each of the rear side panels.
Antenna on the car roof.
Radio with CD/MP3 player.
With Bose Premium Audio system (if equipped):
Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers.
Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars.
Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each
of the rear side panels.
A subwoofer under the right front seat.
An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel.
Antenna on the car roof.
Radio with CD/MP3 player.
Quick Guide
Radio Controls
BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE
On Short button press
Off Long button press
TUNER AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source
selection
Short repeated button press
A-B-C Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM,
SAT (if equipped)
MEDIA CD/AUX/Media Player (if
equipped and present) source selec-
tion
4
BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE
(Mute/Pause Button) Volume activation/deactivation
(Mute/Pause)
Short button press
AUDIO Audio adjustments: low tones
(BASS), high tones (TREBLE), left/
right balance (BALANCE), front/
rear balance (FADER)
Menu activation: short button press
Adjustment type selection: press
or Adjustment of values:
press or
(Information Button) Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Playlist,
Folder information (if available) in
CD, Media Player and Satellite (if so
equipped); Toggles RBDS informa-
tion in FM
MENU Advanced functions adjustment Menu activation: short button press
Adjustment type selection: press
or Adjustment of values:
press or
+Vol/Vol Volume adjustment Press + button: volume increase
Press button: volume decrease
BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS MODE
Radio Station Search:
Automatic Search
Manual Search
Automatic search: press buttons
or (long press for fast for-
ward) Manual search: press buttons
or (long press for fast for-
ward)
1 2 3 4 5 Current radio station storing Long button press for memory pre-
set 1 to 5 respectively
Stored station recall Short button press for memory pre-
set 1 to 5 respectively
BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS MODE
CD ejection Short button press
Previous/next track play Short button press or
CD track fast forward/rewind Long button press or
Previous/next folder play (for CD-
MP3)
Short button press or
4
General Information
The radio offers the following functions:
Radio Section
PLL tuning with FM/AM/MW frequency bands
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
Automatic/manual station tuning
FM Multipath detector
Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40
stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band (5
on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band (5 on
AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if equipped (5
on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC)
SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable auto-
matic volume adjustment depending on the car speed
Automatic Stereo/Mono selection
CD Section
Track selection (forward/backward)
Fast forward/rewind through tracks
CD Display function: display of track number and on
mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since
start of the track
Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW
WARNING!
On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are
data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause
hissing at a volume that could jeopardize road safety
as well as causing damage to the final stages and the
speakers.
CD/MP3 Section
MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG)
Folder selection (previous/next)
Track selection (forward/backward)
Fast forward/rewind through tracks
MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3-
TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the
track, name of the file
Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW
Audio Section
Mute/pause function
Soft mute function
Loudness function
Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped)
Separate bass/treble tone adjustment
Right/left channel balancing
Front/rear fader
Functions And Adjustments
Turning The Car Radio On
The car radio comes on when the (ON/OFF) button
is pressed briefly.
When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit
is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it
had been set higher when previously used.
Turning The Car Radio Off
Press and hold (approximately 2 seconds) the
(ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off.
4
Selecting The Radio Functions
By pressing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly,
the following audio sources can be selected cyclically:
AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped)
Selecting The CD Function
By briefly pressing the MEDIA button, the CD audio
source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded).
Volume Adjustment
To adjust the volume, press the buttons +Vol or Vol to
increase/decrease the volume.
Mute/Pause Function
Press the button briefly to activate the MUTE
function. The volume will gradually decrease and the
wording TUNER Mute will be shown on the display
(in radio mode) or CD Pause (in CD mode).
Press the button again to deactivate the MUTE
function. The volume will gradually increase until it
reaches the previously set level.
When the volume level is changed using the dedicated
controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the vol-
ume is adjusted to the new level selected.
Audio Adjustment
The functions that can be selected from the audio menu
change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/
SATELLITE.
Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio
functions. After the AUDIO button is first pressed, the
display will show the Bass level value for the source
activated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will
show the wording FM Bass +2).
Use the buttons or to scroll through the Menu
functions. To change the setting of the selected function,
use the or buttons.
The current status of the selected function appears on the
display.
The functions managed by the Audio Menu are:
BASS (Bass adjustment)
TREBLE (Treble adjustment)
BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment)
FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment)
LOUDNESS (Loudness function activation/
deactivation)
EQUALIZER if equipped (activation and selection
of factory equalization adjustments)
USER EQUALIZER if equipped (customized equal-
ization adjustment)
Tone Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
1. Press AUDIO button.
2. Press the or button to select Bass or
Treble in the AUDIO menu.
3. Press the or button or to increase/decrease
the bass or treble adjustments.
By pressing the or buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the
levels will change quickly.
Balance Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
4
2. Press the or button to set Balance in the
AUDIO menu.
3. Press the button to increase the sound from the
left speakers or the button to increase the sound from
the right speakers.
Select the value 0 to set the right and left audio outputs
at the same level.
Fader Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
2. Press the or button to set Fader in the
AUDIO menu.
3. Press the button to increase the sound coming
from the rear speakers or the button to increase the
sound coming from the front speakers.
Select the value 0 to set the right and left audio outputs
at the same level.
Loudness Function If Equipped
The Loudness function improves the volume of the
sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass
and treble.
To activate/deactivate this function, select the Loud-
ness setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the
function (on or off) is shown on the display for a few
seconds by the wording Loudness On or Loudness
Off.
Preset/User*/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions If
Equipped
The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated.
When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can
only be changed by adjusting the Bass and Treble
settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic
curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select
the EQ Preset function in the audio menu.
To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button or to
select one of the adjustments:
EQ User (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can
be changed by the user)
Classic (equalizer preset for optimal classic music
sound)
Rock (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop
music sound)
Jazz (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound)
When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the
wording EQ lights up.
*User EQ Settings Function If Equipped
To set a personalized equalizer adjustment:
2. Use the or buttons to set EQ function.
3. Use or buttons to select EQ User.
4. Press MENU button to start adjusting equalizer.
5. On the display a 7 bar graph will appears, in which
each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be
adjusted by using the or buttons. The selected
bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using or
buttons.
6. To store the setting, press the MENU or AUDIO
buttons.
4
Menu
MENU Button Functions
Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu
function.
Use the or buttons to scroll through the menu
functions. To change the setting of the selected function,
use the or buttons.
The current status of the selected function appears on the
display.
The functions managed by the Menu are:
Speech Volume
Aux Audio Offset
Radio Off
Sat ID
SIRIUS Telephone Number
System Reset
Speed Volume
On Volume Limit
Press the MENU button again to exit the Menu function.
Speed Volume Function If Equipped
This function automatically adapts the volume level to
the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the
speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level
inside the passenger compartment. To activate/
deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording
Speed volume appears on the display, followed by the
current status of the function:
Off: function deactivated
Low: function activated (low sensitivity)
High: function activated (high sensitivity)
On Volume Limit
This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the
maximum volume limit when turning the radio on.
The display shows the function status:
On volume limit: on when the radio is turned on
the volume level will be:
If the volume level is equal to or higher than the
maximum value, the radio will come on at the maxi-
mum volume.
If the volume level is between the minimum and
maximum values, the radio will come on at the same
volume as before it was switched off.
If the volume level is equal to or lower than the
minimum value, the radio will come on at the mini-
mum volume.
On volume limit: off The radio will come on at the
same volume as before it was switched off. The
volume level can be between 0 and 40.
Use the buttons or to change the setting.
NOTE:
Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the
activation/deactivation of the function and not the
minimum or maximum volume value.
If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be
adjusted between the minimum and the maximum
level.
4
Radio Off Function
This function makes it possible to set the radio switching
off mode by choosing between two methods.
The chosen mode appears on the display:
Radio off: 00 min The radio turns off in connec-
tion with the ignition key; the radio is turned auto-
matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP
position.
Radio off: 20 min The radio turns off indepen-
dently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for
a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has
been turned to the STOP position.
System Reset Function
This function is used to restore all settings to the factory
values. The options are:
NO No restore intervention.
YES The default parameters will be restored. Dur-
ing such operation, the wording Resetting appears
on the display. At the end of the operation, the source
does not change and the previous situation will be
displayed.
Radio
(Tuner) Introduction
When the car radio is turned on, the last function that
was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3,
AUX) is activated.
To select the Radio function when another audio source is
being listened to, briefly press the TUNER button.
Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will
show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of
the selected radio station, the frequency band selected
(e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1).
Frequency Band Selection
With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner
button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired recep-
tion band.
Each time the button is pressed the following bands are
selected cyclically:
AM, FM or SAT (if equipped)
Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings
on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station
selected on the respective frequency band.
Preset Buttons
The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the
following pre-selections:
15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC
10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB)
15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC)
To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency
band and then briefly press the corresponding preset
button (from 1 to 5).
By pressing the preset button for more than 2 seconds,
the tuned station will be stored. Pressing the A-B-C
button will change between the preset memory group in
the current frequency band.
Automatic Tuning
Briefly press the or button to start the automatic
tuning search for the next station that can be received in
the selected direction.
If the or button is pressed for longer, the rapid
search is started. When the button is released, the tuner
will stop on the next station that can be received.
Manual Tuning
This is used to manually search for stations in the
preselected band.
4
Select the desired frequency band and then press briefly
and repeatedly the or button to start the search
in the desired direction. If the or button is
pressed longer, the fast search starts and then stops when
the button is released.
Stereophonic Broadcasters
If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is
automatically switched from Stereo to Mono.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio If Equipped
Satellite Radio Antenna If Equipped
The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof
of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the
roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line
of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance.
Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the
antenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio
With over 130 channels, SIRIUS Satellite Radio brings
you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100%
commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports,
news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game,
every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The big-
gest and most compelling names in talk with Howard
Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with
Jamie Foxxs The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus
kids programming, world-class news, local traffic and
weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast
coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on
SIRIUS. A one-year SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription
is included. SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. and its subsid-
iaries. SIRIUS Radio requires a subscription, sold sepa-
rately after trial subscription included with vehicle pur-
chase. Prices and programming are provided by SIRIUS
and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by
Terms & Conditions available at sirius.com/service
terms. SIRIUS Radio U.S. service only available to those
at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States,
D.C., and PR. Service available in Canada; see
www.siriuscanada.ca.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Program Types
Program Types can be selected by pressing the or
buttons. The Program Type will change to the next
category and the radio will then tune to first station in
that program type. Pressing or buttons will tune
to only the stations in that program type.
Pressing the or buttons until All is displayed
will allow normal tuning to all stations.
The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock,
Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian,
Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, Enter-
tainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health,
Religion, Traffic/Weather.
You can find SIRIUS current terms and conditions at
http://www.sirius.com.
Re-Subscribe To SIRIUS Satellite Radio
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
their radio. Following expiration of the free services, it
will be necessary to access the information on the Sub-
scription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu
Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the
selected Set-up Menu function.
Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your
receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of
SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0.
Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are
correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered
correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription will not be able to
be transferred to the new radio and will not be active
4
when installed in the customers vehicle. To reactivate
your service, either call the number listed on the display
or visit the provider online.
CAUTION!
Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any
errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its
use in vehicles.
SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are trade-
marks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries.
SIRIUS Radio requires a subscription, sold separately
after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase.
Prices and programming are provided by SIRIUS and are
subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms &
Conditions available at sirius.com/service terms. SIRIUS
Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years
of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., & PR.
Visit www.sirius.com
Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A
Sirius Radio
When a radio needs to be replaced, the dealer will need
the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the
SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number con-
tains 12 digits.
The following are instructions for retrieving the Elec-
tronic Serial Number (ESN) fromFIAT 500 NAFTAmodel
radios:
To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module
tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is
placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers
are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription
will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and
will not be active when installed in the customers
vehicle.
CD Player
Introduction
This chapter describes the operation of the CD player
only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the
Functions and Adjustments chapter.
CD Player Selection
To activate the CD player built into the equipment,
proceed as follows:
Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first
track will start to play.
or
If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and
then briefly press the MEDIAbutton to select the CD
function mode. The last track listened to will start to
play.
It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal
playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using
good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed
possible.
CD Loading/Ejecting
To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the
motorized loading system, which will position it cor-
rectly.
The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition
key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will
remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source
listened to before being switched off, will be activated.
When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol
CD and the wording CD Reading. They will remain
displayed for the whole time required for the radio to
read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio
automatically starts playing the first track.
4
Press the button with the radio turned on, to activate
the motorized CD ejection system. After ejection, the last
audio source listened to before playing the CD will be
heard.
If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automati-
cally be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not
resume playing until the MEDIA button is pressed to
select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last
source prior to CD mode.
The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off.
Possible Error Messages
If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been
inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is
a reading error) the display shows the wording CD Disc
error.
The CD will then be ejected and the audio source
activated before the CD mode selection will be heard.
ACD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these
functions are over. At the end, with the CD mode
activated, the display will show the wording CD Disc
error for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected.
Display Information
When the CD player is operating, information will ap-
pear on the display with the following meaning:
Track 5 indicates the CD track number.
03:42 indicates the time elapsed since the start of the
track (if the relevant Menu function is activated).
Track Selection
Briefly press the button to play the previous CDtrack
and the button to play the next track. The tracks are
selected cyclically: the first track is selected after the last
track and vice versa.
If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds,
pressing the button, starts the track again from the
beginning. In this case, if you want to play the previous
track, press the button twice consecutively.
Track Fast Forward/Rewind
Keep the button pressed down to fast forward the
selected track and keep the button pressed down to
fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will stop
once the button is released.
Pause Function
To pause the CD player, press the button. The
wording CD Pause appears on the display.
To resume listening to the track, press the button
again.
CD MP3 Player
Introduction
This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3
player.
NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed
from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
MP3 Mode
In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also
enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio
files have been recorded in an MP3 format.
To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use
good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible.
The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that
create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks
(folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The
folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected.
The specifications and operating conditions for playing
MP3 files are the following:
The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance
with ISO standard 9660.
4
The music files should have the extension .mp3 or
.wma files with a different extension will not be
reproduced.
The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are:
44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) 22.05 kHz,
mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s).
Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced.
NOTE: The track names must not include the following
characters: spaces, (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close
brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure
that the names of the files do not contain these characters;
if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks
involved.
Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs
If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced,
CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automati-
cally starts playing the audio session. It is possible to
move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the
CD button pressed for more than 2 seconds.
NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may
take a few seconds to start playing. While checking the
disc the display will show CD Reading. If no MP3 files
are detected, the radio will resume playing the audio
session from the point where it was interrupted.
Display Information
ID3Tag Information Display
In addition to the information relating to the time
elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also
capable of displaying ID3TAG information relating to
Title Track, Artist and Author.
When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen
to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this informa-
tion has not been recorded for the track played, the text
UNKNOWN will be displayed for that field.
Selection Of Next/Previous Folder
Press the button to select a next folder or the
button to select the previous folder. The display will
show the number of the folder.
The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is
selected after the last folder and vice versa.
If no other folder/track is selected in the next 2 seconds,
the first track on the new folder will be played.
At that moment selected the last track in the folder is
playing, the next folder will be played.
Structure Of The Folders
The radio with MP3 player:
Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain
MP3 format files
If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in
sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single
level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the
level of the main folders.
Troubleshooting
General
Sound Volume Low
The Fader function should be adjusted to the values F
(front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output
power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level
adjustment is equal to R+9.
Source Can Not Be Selected
Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to
be listened to.
4
CD Player
The Cd Does Not Play
The CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
The CD is scratched. Try using another CD.
The Cd Can Not Be Loaded
ACD is already loaded. Press the button and remove
the CD.
MP3 File Reading
Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files
The CD is scratched or dirty.
The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly
Displayed.
In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of
the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly.
Operating Instructions Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to the appropriate BLUE&ME Users Manual
for further information.
Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) If
Equipped
A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is avail-
able as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the
Navigation User Guide for further information.
iPod/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-
ment.
Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me radio Users Manual
for iPod or external USB device support capability.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
1 iPod Or External USB Device Holder
2 Cable Jack
3 USB Connector
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to
select/enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will Seek down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player Operation
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Operating Instructions Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me Users Manual for
further information.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials and one inner push knob.
1. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to
the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
2. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the 0 (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
3. Recirculation Control
Rotate this control to change the system between recir-
culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
NOTE:
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost and Mix.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
4. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
4
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demister outlets. Use this mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
5. A/C Button
Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
modes at the same time.
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Operating Tips Chart
4
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If
Equipped
The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the
driver to select individual comfort settings.
The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button
Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recir-
culation automatically. Press and release to select. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to
Automatic Operation for more information.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
3. Temperature Control Up Button
Provides temperature up control. Push the button for
warmer temperature settings.
4. Blower Control Up Button
There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed increases
as you press this button. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
5. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side win-
dow demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or
snowy conditions that require extra heat to the wind-
shield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while
reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing this
function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
6. Front Defrost
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON. The blower will auto-
matically default to medium-high if the Defrost mode is
selected. Performing this function will cause the ATC to
switch into manual mode.
7. Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small
amount flowing through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
8. Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
4
9. Blower Control Down Button
There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed decreases
as you press this button. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
10. Temperature Control Down Button
Provides temperature down control. Push the button for
cooler temperature settings.
11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF.
12. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE:
When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will
flash if pressed. This indicates that you can not pro-
ceed to this mode due to fogging risk.
When the Auto indicator is on and the Recirculation
indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If
the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation
setting is manual and Recirculation is on.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate when
on.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Customer-Programmable Features
in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into AUTO mode.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
There are 12 fixed blower speeds. Use
the blower control up or down buttons
to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as
you press or hold the blower control
up button and decreases when you
press or hold the blower control down
button.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
pressing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan
will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds
Blower Control
4
are selected. This allows the front occupants to control
the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
AUTO mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. Aslight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor
mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators
illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch into manual mode.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
while keeping the windshield clear.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demister outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
blower will automatically default to medium-high.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Defrost mode to improve
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be dis-
abled automatically if this mode is selected.
4
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when its rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
DEFROST mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature opera-
tion, the air conditioning system performance may be
reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheat-
ing during the high load condition.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recir-
culation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while
in automatic mode.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
obstructions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Extended Park Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Turbocharger Cool Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
5
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . 205
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 210
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 217
Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 218
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 219
Tires General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 225
Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
All Season Tires If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 226
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Summer Or Three Season Tires If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 233
Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 240
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Recreational Towing (Behind
Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position and
release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the Normal Starting procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than 22 F (30 C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. An externally-
powered electric engine block heater is available as
optional equipment or from your authorized dealer.
The message plug in engine heater will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below 5 F (15 C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 synthetic en-
gine oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change
intervals is important to prevent engine damage and
ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the ve-
hicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it when the engine starts.
5
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait
10 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Turbocharger Cool Down
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
5
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or paths surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicles drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicles fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicles engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cles traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cles braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Getting water inside your vehicles engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
The power steering system is speed sensitive for light
steering effort during slow speed parking maneuvers,
and gradually increases the steering effort as vehicle
speed increases to provide a tighter/more sporty steering
response.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced or no power steer-
ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon as pos-
sible.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
do not leave the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Parking Brake
5
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave a manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to
do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
SPORT MODE
In Sport mode, the engine is more responsive to the
throttle pedal, and provides more maximum torque by
increasing turbo boost pressure. Steering feedback is
improved, and steering effort is slightly higher. This
driving mode is useful for spirited driving.
1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button.
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example; repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake
use.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
SPORT Button
5
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The systems pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
(Continued)
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the users safety
or the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con-
trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System in Start-
ing and Operating for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicles braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
5
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
pump the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
(Continued)
The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the users safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the Partial Off mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) in this section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSAwill maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
Vehicle must be stopped.
Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission)
grade hill.
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill
is in REVERSE gear).
5
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
2.5%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a
trailer, when the system will not activate and slight
rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further
information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent col-
lisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has three available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific
reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC
Off switch. This mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended
for driving in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions,
when more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is
required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch
again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of
operation.
5
WARNING!
When in Partial Off mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the ESC Off
Indicator Light will be illuminated. All other stabil-
ity features of ESC function normally. When in
Partial Off mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on public roadways. In this
mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF.
To enter the Full Off mode, depress and hold the ESC
OFF switch for five seconds. After five seconds, the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the ESC OFF
message will display in the EVIC. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily press the ESC OFF switch.
WARNING!
In the ESC Full Off mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are cancelled. There-
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. The Full Off ESC mode is intended
for off-highway or offroad use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
5
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
1 U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 Maximum Load
2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure
3 Service Description 6 Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
Tires designed to this standard have the letter T or
Smolded into the sidewall preceding the size desig-
nation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
R means radial construction
D means diagonal or bias construction
5
EXAMPLE:
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
....blank.... = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturers recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicles loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the drivers side B-Pillar.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg
on your vehicles placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (because 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tires ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in a need
for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
drivers side B-Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 F (7 C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68 F (20 C) and the
outside temperature = 32 F (0 C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 F (7 C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
5
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial-ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial-ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
All Season Tires If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
5
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spare; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicles wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In
Emergencies for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicles wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher,
and summer tires, typically have a reduced tread life.
Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance sched-
ule is highly recommended
1 Worn Tire
2 New Tire
5
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
Tread Wear Indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
5
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following
diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to Tires General Information
in Starting and Operating for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicles tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including lowtemperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
Tire Rotation
5
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 F (20
C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20 F (-7 C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicles recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
5
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the Check Tire Pressure text message
will display when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicles
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Unavailable text message will display. If the ignition key
is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. Asystem fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and the Check Tire Pressure message will still turn ON
due to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid and the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Unavailable message will be displayed.
5
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable
message will be displayed.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4
Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4 (Single)
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded regular gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. For
optimum performance and fuel economy
the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% Ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
5
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% Ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher Ethanol
content may void the vehicles warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
operate in a lean mode
OBD II check engine light on
poor engine performance
poor cold start and cold driveability
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To recover from a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled
once with E-85 perform the following:
drain the fuel tank
change the engine oil
replace the fuel filter and oil filter
disconnect the battery to reset the engine controller
long term adaptive memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT has been
shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission
system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends using gasoline without MMT. Since the
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or
not their gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasoline without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles
performance:
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emission control system.
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
5
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of Methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period of time. If
the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short period,
adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, out-
side air into the vehicle.
(Continued)
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top
off the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
(Continued)
Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may
cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the gASCAP message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a clicking
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not allowed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission
Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NEUTRAL
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
5
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis-
sion is in NEUTRAL.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
TIREFIT Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 250
TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Jacking And Tire Changing If Equipped . . . 259
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
On the highways slow down.
In city traffic while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
248 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT
Small punctures up to 1/4 in (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4F (-20C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/h).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 249
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located under the front drivers seat.
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Power Button
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position
for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air
Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting
this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys-
tem. Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section (F)
Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use. After each use, always replace
these components immediately at an authorized
dealer.
When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
6
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is
only intended to seal punctures less than
1
4 in (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
(Continued)
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
(Continued)
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
6
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicles
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the
valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground.
This will provide the best positioning of the kit when
injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the
valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in Gear and turn Off the
ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicles 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE-
FIT kit.
NOTE: The transmission must have the parking brake
engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the
TIREFIT kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if avail-
able. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
the TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
6
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 sec-
onds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6),
the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from ap-
proximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when
the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pres-
sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) Drive Vehicle.
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicles inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT before continuing.
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicles 12 Volt power outlet.
6
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door open-
ing.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser-
vice center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to (F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the au-
thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the TIREFIT service kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of
it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous-
ing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the
front of the housing. Press the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
(Continued)
6
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in a bag under the
front drivers seat.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Stowage
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in REVERSE.
5. Turn Off the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
Set the parking brake firmly and place the shift
lever in REVERSE.
(Continued)
6
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, tires must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the
drivers seat.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jack Warning Label
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on
each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding).
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
6
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
4. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the
hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, the
center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts.
Jacking Location
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
6. Install the wheel and wheel bolts with the cone shaped
end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the bolts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel bolts. Alternate bolts until
each bolt has been tightened twice. The correct wheel bolt
torque is 63 ft lbs (85 Nm) for steel wheels and 75 ft lbs
(100 Nm) for aluminum wheels. If you doubt that you
have tightened the bolts correctly, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
9. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the
bag. Stow it under the drivers seat and secure the bag to
the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts in the places
provided.
10. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure as required.
6
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturers operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the transmission into gear
and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
1 Positive Battery Post
2 Negative Battery Post
6
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicles engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicles battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicles
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between 1st gear
and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-
tem OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle.
CAUTION!
When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween 1st gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission or clutch overheating
and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in
gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cles wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Manual Transmission
Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON/
RUN position. Make certain the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
6
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position. A dolly
should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels
are raised. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe transmission damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
Engine Compartment 1.4L Turbo . . . . . . . . 275
Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II . . . . . . . 276
Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
7
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 312
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 315
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
274 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1.4L TURBO
1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery
2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill
3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 275
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmis-
sion control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well
within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicles emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicles OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicles OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicles OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
7
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de-
signed performance.
Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are
not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturers
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. If a flush is needed because of compo-
nent malfunction, use only the specified fluid for
the flushing procedure.
7
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone.
Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full
end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for tur-
bocharged engines under all types of operating condi-
tions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-10896.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to Engine Compart-
ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further
information.
7
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be im-
paired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
Jump-Starting Procedures in What To Do In
Emergencies for further information.
(Continued)
7
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a fast charger is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
7
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
1 Wiper Arm
2 Pivot Cap
7
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
1 Wiper Blade
2 Blade Pivot Pin
3 Wiper Arm
4 Wiper Blade Holder
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/antifreeze).
Refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your
Vehicle for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
7
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas in Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturers specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
Cooling System
WARNING!
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in
Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
systemin an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to ten years or 152,000 miles (247 000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below 34 F (37 C)
are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owners responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) remains pressurized.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the bottom and top lines marked COLD FILL
RANGE.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
7
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) per-
formance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the Brake Warning Light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
7
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in Main-
taining Your Vehicle for further information.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturers recommended brake
fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
7
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in
Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes of corrosion are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
(Continued)
7
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do
not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
the wheels protective finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or a high quality cleaner, to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
7
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore,
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the
car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
7
FUSES
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the drivers side under
the instrument panel.
Cavity Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
1
F12 7.5 Amp
Brown
Right Low Beam
2
F32 5 Amp
Tan
Front and Rear
Ceiling Lights
Trunk and Door
Courtesy Lights
3
F53 5 Amp
Tan
Instrument Panel
Node
4
F38 20 Amp
Yellow
Central Door Lock-
ing
5
F36 10 Amp
Red
Diagnostic Socket,
Car Radio, Climate
Control System
6
F43 20 Amp
Yellow
Bi-Directional
Washer
Fuse Panel
Cavity Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
7
F48 20 Amp
Yellow
Passenger Power
Window
8
F13 7.5 Amp
Brown
Left Low Beam,
Headlamp Leveling
9
F50 7.5 Amp
Brown
Airbag
10
F51 5 Amp
Tan
Car Radio Switch,
Climate Control
System, Stop Light,
Clutch
11
F37 5 Amp
Tan
Stop Light Switch,
Instrument Panel
Node
Cavity Vehicle
Fuse
Number
Mini
Fuse
Description
12
F49 5 Amp
Tan
Exterior Mirror,
GPS, Electric Mir-
ror, Parking Sensor
13
F31 5 Amp
Tan
Ignition, Climate
Control
14
F47 20 Amp
Yellow
Driver Power Win-
dow
7
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp
Blue
Body Controller
F02 20 Amp
Yellow
Audio Amplifier
F03 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp
Orange
Anti-Lock Brake
Pump
F05 70 Amp
Tan
Electric Power
Steering
F06 20 Amp
Yellow
Radiator Fan -
Single Speed
F06 30 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan -
Low Speed
F07 40 Amp
Orange
Radiator Fan -
High Speed
Front Distribution Unit
F08 30 Amp
Green
Blower Motor
F09 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain
F10 10 Amp
Red
Horn
F11 15 Amp
Blue
Powertrain
F11 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain (Multi-
air If Equipped)
F14 5 Amp Tan High beam (Shut-
ter)
F15 15 Amp
Blue
Cigar Lighter
F16 7.5 Amp
Brown
Transmission
F17 25 Amp
White
Powertrain (Multi-
air If Equipped)
F17 15 Amp
Blue
Powertrain
F18 15 Amp
Blue
Powertrain
F18 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multi-
air If Equipped)
F19 7.5 Amp
Brown
Air Conditioning
F20 15 Amp
Blue
Heated Seats If
Equipped
F21 15 Amp
Blue
Fuel Pump
F23 20 Amp
Yellow
Anti-Lock Brake
Valves
7
F24 7.5 Amp
Brown
Stability Control
System
F30 15 Amp
Blue
Fog Lamps
F82 30 Amp
Green
Sunroof/
Convertible Top
F84 10 Amp
Red
Transmission
F85 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Defroster,
Heated Mirrors
F87 5 Amp Tan Lights
F90 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights Bulb Type
Overhead Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C5W
Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Exterior Lights Bulb Type
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp. . . . . . . . . HIR2
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps. . . . . W21/5W
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Front Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WY21W
Side Direction Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PY21W
Rear Side Marker Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W
Rear Tail and Stop Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P21W/5W
Rear Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(See Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
7
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand
access to side marker lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Unsnap backplate and separate from the lamp hous-
ing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
7
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening
screws.
2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the electric connector.
4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and re-
place it.
6. Close the back cap locking it properly.
7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the
guard caps.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 10.5 Gallons 40 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula OAT (Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the re-
quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10896. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs SIKR9A7 (Gap 0.026 in [0.65mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane Acceptable 91 Octane Recommended
7
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission MOPAR C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 319
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Change Engine Oil in Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa-
tion.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
318 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop For Fuel
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
Check the fluid levels of the engine coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, and add as needed.
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with 17 summer tires,
more frequent tire rotation may be necessary to achieve
optimal tread wear, and tire rotation at each oil change
indicator message is recommended.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 319
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
Inspect exhaust system.
Replace cabin filter.
Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect CV joints.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
filter.
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 32,000 miles (52 000 km).
Replace the spark plugs.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect CV joints.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
Service Schedule
filter.
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Schedule
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
Inspect CV joints.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
Service Schedule
filter.
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
Schedule
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
Inspect CV joints.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
Service Schedule
filter.
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
Schedule
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
Inspect CV joints.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
Service Schedule
filter.
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
Schedule
96,000 miles (156 000 km).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Inspect CV joints.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
Service Schedule
filter.
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
Schedule
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
Inspect CV joints.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
Service Schedule
filter.
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
Schedule
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
Inspect CV joints.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
Service Schedule
filter.
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Schedule
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
Inspect CV joints.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
Flush and replace engine coolant.
Replace the timing belt.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fiat Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturers authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
332 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealers service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturers customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturers customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
Owners name and address
Owners telephone number (home and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 218004
Auburn Hills, MI 483218004
Phone: (888) 2426342
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 333
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturers New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturers service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturers service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturers Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
4652001 English / (800) 3879983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturers service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturers service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturers service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturers New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group
Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
9
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing FIAT Group
Automobiles vehicles. Acomplete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
Owners Manuals
These Owners Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles
vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
18008904038 (U.S.)
18003871143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tires manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tires ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. Atire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 293
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 282
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,286
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,184,285
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,46
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,52,66,126
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,43,46
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 41,43,46
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 292,314,315
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 184
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 17
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
342 INDEX
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,297
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,207
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 63
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 314
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,242
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,276
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,55
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
10
INDEX 343
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 176
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,315
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,295
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294,296
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 292
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,182,188
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
344 INDEX
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 100
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 135
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 276
Engine
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,242
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,314,315
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 47
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,65,242
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,289
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,315
10
INDEX 345
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,125
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,315
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,243
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,245
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,314
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,238
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
346 INDEX
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259,261
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10
INDEX 347
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,91,92
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,52,66,126
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 129
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 127
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,93,125
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Wait to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 124
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
348 INDEX
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 129,277
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,49
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . 24,40,41,43,46
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,314
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,314
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
10
INDEX 349
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Operator Manual (Owners Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,248
Owners Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,336
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 219
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 112
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,179
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 177
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,58
350 INDEX
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,54
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,93
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 100,126
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10
INDEX 351
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,310
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 37
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 184
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 133,249
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 219
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,223,337
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
352 INDEX
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,220
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 233
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,223
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Transmission
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,125
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 176
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,310
10
INDEX 353
Wait to Start Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,335
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,98
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,110
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,182
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,98
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,286
354 INDEX
872214.ps 12FF500-126-AA Fiat 1" gutter 10/04/2010 11:37:45
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
accidents.
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
accidents.
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT
872214.ps 12FF500-126-AA Fiat 1" gutter 10/04/2010 11:37:45
Chrysler Group LLC
12FF500-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2
0
1
2

5
0
0
500
O WNE R S MA NU A L
2 0 1 2
500
O WNE R S MA NU A L
2 0 1 2
Chrysler Group LLC
2
0
1
2

5
0
0
12FX24-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.

2012 FIAT 500 Abarth Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 FIAT 500 Abarth Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 FIAT 500 Abarth Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FI AT 500 ABARTH

Chrysler Group LLC

You might also like